Yamaha Rx V675 Owners Manual User 121953

2014-12-11

User Manual: Yamaha Rx-V675-Owners-Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 139 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear panel (RX-V775) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear panel (RX-V675) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PREPARATIONS 14
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting an external power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PLAYBACK 45
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
En 3
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
CONFIGURATIONS 81
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 103
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 105
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
En 4
APPENDIX 114
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Accessories En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V775 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
(RX-V775) (RX-V675)
30° 30°
FEATURES ➤What you can do with the unit En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
.p.127
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
.p.46
Supports 2- to 7.1-channel (plus presence)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
.p.37
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
.p.48
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
.p.52
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(multi-zone)
.p.72
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad .p.58
•USB .p.62
• Media server (PC/NAS) .p.65
• Internet radio .p.68
•AirPlay .p.70
3D and 4K signals supported
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet
Control
Control
FEATURES ➤What you can do with the unit En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑Connecting various devices (p.28)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.23)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit our
website for details.
❑Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.48)
Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a
natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers
are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
function produces 3D surround sound.
❑Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
❑Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.52)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
❑Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption (p.102).
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder TV
Set-top box
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.29).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.94).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.97).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to use the supplied remote control to operate
external devices…
Register the remote control codes of the external
devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.108).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.36).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware (p.107). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.113).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.81)
• SCENE settings (p.84)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.86)
• Various function settings (p.89)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.104)
• System settings (p.105)
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 8
Front panel (RX-V775)
1MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)
• An iPod is being charged (p.58)
3ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).
4ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).
5INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
6MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).
7PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).
8FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.53).
9Front display
Displays information (p.10).
0Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
ATUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.53).
BPURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).
CINPUT knob
Selects an input source.
DPHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
EYPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).
FTONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.79).
GSCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
HPROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).
ISTRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).
JVIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).
KUSB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod
(p.58).
VIDEO jack
For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input
source (p.58).
LVOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFOZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
PURE DIRECT
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
:9 B2 34561 78 A
CLF
EDHIJKG
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 9
Front panel (RX-V675)
1MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.96)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.97)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.98)
• An iPod is being charged (p.58)
3YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.37).
4ZONE 2 key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.75).
5Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
6ZONE CONTROL key
Changes the zone (main zone or the Zone2) that is controlled
by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.75).
7INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
8MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.54).
9PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.54).
0FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.53).
AFront display
Displays information (p.10).
BTUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.53).
CPURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.52).
DPHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
EINPUT keys
Select an input source.
FTONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.79).
GSCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
HPROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.47).
ISTRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.51).
JVIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.31) or a smartphone (p.32).
KUSB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.62) or an iPod
(p.58).
VIDEO jack
For inputting video when “USB” is selected as the input
source (p.58).
LVOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
INFOZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
SCENE
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
PURE DIRECT
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
INPUT
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
MHL 5V 1A
5A C3 46781 2 9:
DL
FHIJKEG
B
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 10
Front display (indicators)
1HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT1/OUT2 (RX-V775 only)
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal
OUT (RX-V675 only)
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.48) is working.
CINEMA DSP n
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) is working.
3ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52) is
working.
4ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.79) is working.
5STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
6PARTY (RX-V775 only)
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.76)
7SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8ZONE2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.75).
9MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
0Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
ACursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
BInformation display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.77).
CSpeaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
AFront speaker (L)
SFront speaker (R)
DCenter speaker
FSurround speaker (L)
GSurround speaker (R)
HSurround back speaker (L)
JSurround back speaker (R)
KSurround back speaker
ZPresence speaker (L)
XPresence speaker (R)
LSubwoofer
SW
C
LR
PL PR
SLSR
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
PARTY
3
2
TUNED
SLEEP
ZONE
SBL SBSBR
OUT 1 2
1 623 4 7 98:5
A AB C
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 11
Rear panel (RX-V775)
1REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.74).
2TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.35).
3DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
4NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.33).
5ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).
6HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible TVs and outputting
video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
7MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
8HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
9SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.19).
0VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.35).
APower cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).
BPHONO jacks
(Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
For connecting to a turntable (p.31).
CAUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.31).
DAV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
EAV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.34).
FZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.73).
GPRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or to an
external power amplifier (p.34).
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV O UT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
2
FC G
9
E
681 3 4
B
: A
5
D
7
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 12
Rear panel (RX-V675)
1REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.74).
2TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting to a device that supports the trigger function
(p.35).
3DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
4NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.33).
5HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.23). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
6ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.32).
7HDMI 1–5 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
8SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.19).
9VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.35).
0Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.35).
AAUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.31).
BAV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
CAV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.34).
DZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.73).
EMONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
VIDEO jack
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.27).
FSUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.34).
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
PB
YPR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
PB
Y
PR
HDMI
OUT
ARC
ANTENNA
(RADIO)
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
AV 5 AV 6 AV O UT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
VIDEO
2
D FA
8
C
571 3 4 9 :
6
BE
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to prevent
improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 13
Remote control
1Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.109).
This key lights up in green after pressed.
RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.109). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–5 HDMI 1–5 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)
AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
TUNER FM/AM radio
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
★
(RX-V675, RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models])
Changes the external device to be controlled
without switching the input source.
PHONO
(RX-V775 [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])
PHONO jacks
4MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.75).
5SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.46).
6PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.47).
7External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.109).
8ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.60).
ARadio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.53).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.109).
BSound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.47).
CINFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.77).
DSLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
ENumeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.54).
FTV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.108).
GHDMI OUT key (RX-V775 only)
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.45).
HPARTY key (RX-V775 only)
Turns on/off the party mode (p.76).
IVOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
JMUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
KOPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.78).
LDISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.77).
MCODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.108).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.108).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
H
J
G
K
L
M
1
3
2
5
4
6I
7
E
D
F
8
A
B
:
C
9
(RX-V775 U.S.A. model)
PREPARATIONS ➤General setup procedure En 14
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1Placing speakers (p.15) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2Connecting speakers (p.19) Connect the speakers to the unit.
3Connecting a TV (p.23) Connect a TV to the unit.
4Connecting playback devices (p.28) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.32) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6Connecting to a network (p.33) Connect the unit to a network.
7Connecting other devices (p.34) Connect external devices, such as an external power amplifier (RX-V775 only) and recording devices.
8Connecting the power cable (p.35) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.36) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10 Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.37)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 15
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.122).
• If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers.
To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers.
To create a natural 3-dimensional sound field, use them as presence speakers.
• Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds.
1Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 Front
5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
● ●●●● ● ●●●
Front (R) 2● ●●●● ● ●●●
Center 3Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●●●●● ●
Surround (L) 4Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel
sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
●●●●● ●
Surround (R) 5●●●●● ●
Surround back (L) 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●●
Surround back (R) 7●●
Surround back 8Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Presence (L) QProduce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48), the presence speakers
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room.
●● ●
Presence (R) W●● ●
Subwoofer 9Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. ● ●●●● ● ●●●
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 16
7.1+2-channel system
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.48).
7.1-channel system (using presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
6.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speaker.
45
12
39
67
QW
9
45
12
39
QW
45
12
39
67
45
12
39
8
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 17
5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
Front 5.1-channel system
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
4.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
45
12
39
12
39
QW
45
12
9
12
9
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 18
■Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting speakers En 19
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 7.1+2-,
7.1-, and 6.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 6.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
7.1+2-channel system 7.1-channel system
(using surround back speakers)
2Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
• The illustrations of the unit (rear) used in this section are of the
RX-V775.
–
+
–
+
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
99
QW
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting speakers En 20
7.1-channel system
(using presence speakers)
6.1-channel system
■Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
aRemove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
bLoosen the speaker terminal.
cInsert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
dTighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
aTighten the speaker terminal.
bInsert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
12
3
45
9
QW
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
12
3
45
9
8
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it
to the SINGLE jack (L side).
The unit (rear)
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting speakers En 21
Push-type speaker terminals
(RX-V675 only)
aRemove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
bPress down the tab.
cInsert the bare wires of the cable into the hole in the
terminal.
dRelease the tab.
■Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks
output the same signals.
ONE 2/F.PRESENCE
TRA SP
aa b
c
d+ (red)
- (black)
Audio pin cable
12
3
45
9
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Input/output jacks and cables En 22
■Video/audio jacks
❑HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
❑HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL
connection” (p.32).
■Video jacks
❑COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■Audio jacks
❑OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
MHL cable
T
OR OUT
Component video cable
Video pin cable
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 23
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.
• (RX-V775 only)
HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
3Connecting a TV
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.127).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack? ■ Connection Method 3 (p.26)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.25)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.23)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.27)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
HDMI
ARC
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT (ARC) jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 24
❑Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2Configure the settings of the unit.
aCheck that ARC is enabled on the TV.
bSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
cPress ON SCREEN.
dUse the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
eUse the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
fUse the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
gUse the cursor keys to select “On”.
hPress ON SCREEN.
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
bTurn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
dSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
eCheck the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
fCheck that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.25).
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 25
■Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu.
• (RX-V775 only)
HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
❑Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2Configure the settings of the unit.
aSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
bPress ON SCREEN.
cUse the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
dUse the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
eUse the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
fUse the cursor keys to select “On”.
gPress ON SCREEN.
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 26
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
bTurn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
dSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
eCheck the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
fCheck that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or
if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”
(p.96) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.46),
you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,
the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV
(except some component video signals), regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the
unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.126).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• (RX-V775 only)
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.27).
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
OPTICAL
O
O
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 27
■Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the front VIDEO jack
of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio
will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO 1–2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.46), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
■Connecting another TV or a projector
(RX-V775 only)
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.45).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
H
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
S
U
FRONT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
OPTICAL
O
O
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks Video input
(component video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
H
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
S
U
FRONT
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
VV
OPTICAL
O
O
OPTICAL
AV4
(TV)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack Video input
(composite video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(B
D
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE
O
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
HDMI
HDMI
12
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 28
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.58)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.62)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.29).
■HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.23 to 26).
■Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• The component video signals (other than 480i/576i signals) input to AV 1–2 jacks of the unit can be output
from the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks only. To watch those videos, you need to connect
your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.27).
4Connecting playback devices
O
1 AUDI O 2
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER
SPEAKERS
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
K
T
VIDEO
CENTER
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 4 HDMI 5HDMI 3HDMI 2
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–5 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
VID
E
M
O
H
(B
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE
ZON
E
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AV2
AV 1
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
OO
CC
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit
(rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 29
■Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack
(p.23 to 26) or to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.27) of the unit.
■Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
12
ARC
AN
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6
A
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(
R
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–6 (VIDEO)
jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–5 AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–5 AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
12
ARC
ANTEN
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV O
U
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADI
O
AV 5
R
L
AUDIO
AV2
P
B
YP
R
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 30
• The following operation is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
1After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be
used) and press the cursor key (q).
6Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
7Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).
8Press ON SCREEN.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
RETURN
OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MEN
U
NET
TUNER
USB
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
12
12
34
N
TUNE
R
US
B
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V-AU
X
1
1
2
3
4
ON SCREEN
ENTER
AV 2
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 31
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2 or PHONO*, the audio
played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.58) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.62).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
❑HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.23 to 26).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that match the output jacks on your device.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO jack are output from the
HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–2
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO*
When connecting a turntable
(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada models])
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SURROUND
FRONT
PR
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
PHONO
GND
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
C
L
R
L
R
O
O
L
R
L
R
C
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks* Audio output (PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 32
❑MHL connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio
directly from the mobile device to the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.23 to 26).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
TONE
PROGRAM
YPAO MIC
MHL 5V 1A
MHL
MHL
Mobile device
MHL output
The unit (front)
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
CENTER
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
CENTER
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting to a network En 33
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.98).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6Connecting to a network
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUR. BA
C
SURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
SING
L
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting other devices En 34
Connecting an external power amplifier
(RX-V775 only)
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
1FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
2SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4SUBWOOFER1–2 jacks
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. When 2 subwoofers are connected, the same
sound is output from them.
5CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks or AUDIO 1–2 jacks of
the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
7Connecting other devices
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using an external amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, do not connect other
devices (except the unit) to the amplifier.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
(BD/DVD)
2
ANTENNA
FM
AM
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CENTER
SINGLE
ZONE 2
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
CENTER
1
2
H
DMI
OUT
(RADIO)
1 2 3 4 5
The unit (rear)
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
C
AL
C
AL
X
IAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
SUBW
O
SUR. BACKSURROUND
FRONT
PRE OUT
CEN
T
SINGLE
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
(NET)
COMPONENT VIDEO
CEN
T
1
2
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
R
L
AUDIO
R
L
AUDIO
AV OUT
VIDEO
VV
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear) AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording
device
Audio recording
device
Audio input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting the power cable En 35
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
12
ARC
ANTENNA
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
TRIGGER OUT
12V
0.1A
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT jack
System
connection
input
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
8Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
U
ND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
220V
-
240V
110V
-
120V
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR
5
CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8Power cable connection 910
PREPARATIONS ➤Selecting an on-screen menu language En 36
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9Selecting an on-screen menu language
123456789Language setting 10
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 37
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting
YPAO.
4Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
YPAO MIC
jack
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
RECEIVER z
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38
The following screen appears on the TV.
(RX-V675)
(RX-V775)
(RX-V675)
This completes the preparations.
See “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)”
(p.39) to start the measurement.
(RX-V775)
Proceed to Step 5.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
• To configure the power amplifier assignment setting, press RETURN and
select “Manual Setup” (p.91).
5(RX-V775 only) If desired, change the measuring
method (multi/single).
aUse the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
bUse the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external
devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
RECEIVER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) (RX-V775
only)” (p.40)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.39)
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Follow the procedure below for measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
1To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40
2Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure) (RX-V775 only)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.43) or “Warning messages” (p.44).
1To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41
3When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.41).
4Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
6Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.89) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1Measurement result items
2Measurement result details
3The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed) * RX-V775 only
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
12
3
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42
2Use the cursor keys to select an item.
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
3To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.88).
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.41) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.41) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
PLAYBACK ➤Basic playback procedure En 45
PLAYBACK
1Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
• Playing back iPod music (p.58)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.62)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.65)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.68)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.70)
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.79).
On-screen input selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack (RX-V775 only)
1Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.46).
• When “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
Basic playback procedure
HDMI OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
HDMI OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
HDMI OUT 2
HDMI OUT Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
HDMIOUT1+2
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 46
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI
output jack (RX-V775 only) with just one touch.
1Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
Configuring scene assignments
1Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.45)
• Select a sound program (p.47)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52)
• (RX-V775 only)
Selecting an HDMI output jack (p.45)
2Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.109) to register it.
• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.83).
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.84) in the “Scene” menu.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input Sound
program
Compressed
Music Enhancer
HDMI output jack
(RX-V775 only)
BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE
(Sci-Fi) Off HDMI OUT 1+2
TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On HDMI OUT 1+2
NET NET
RADIO
MUSIC
(7ch Stereo) On HDMI OUT 1+2
RADIO TUNER MUSIC
(7ch Stereo) On HDMI OUT 1+2
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SETComplete
VOL.
SBL SBR
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
SCENE
SOURCE
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 47
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.49).
❑Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.50).
❑Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.51).
❑Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.51).
❑Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.52).
❑Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.52).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.85).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.51) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.103).
Selecting the sound mode
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 48
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you
to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert
halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.79) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of
the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no presence speakers are
connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
■Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce
up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We
recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more
effective stereoscopic sound field.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
PL PR
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 49
■Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑MOVIE THEATER
❑ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 50
■Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑CLASSICAL
❑LIVE/CLUB
❑STEREO
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.48) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 51
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
■Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.123).
1Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SBL SBR
bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
ProLogic
VOL.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 52
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Using the multi-zone function
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.80) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
PUREDIRECT
SW
C
L
SLSR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
SBL SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 53
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.80) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
TUFM50/AM9
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SBL SBR
FM98.50MHz
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
P
RE
S
E
T
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 54
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.57).
■Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.53)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
■Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.57).
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
SBL SBR
Preset number
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
SBL SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 55
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.57).
2Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
Traffic information station (frequency)
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 56
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■Playback screen
1Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
3TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
2
13
4
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM (U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 57
■Browse screen
1Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2Preset number
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 58
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO jack on the front panel. To select a video,
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.60).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change
without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
Supported iPod (as of February 2013)
• iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)
• iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX
MHL 5V 1A
The unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 59
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.60).
■Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 60
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.61) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
■Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
hSearches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Operational remote control
keys Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
aStarts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
sStops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
hSearches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MODE
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 61
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Connecting a USB storage device
1Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
HDMI/ 5V 2.1A
VIDEO
AUX
MHL 5V 1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
USB
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 63
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 64
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.64) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
■For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 66
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
■Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 67
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.67) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select scrollable information.
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.83).
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to Internet radio En 68
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.33). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Listening to Internet radio
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to Internet radio En 69
■Browse screen
1Playback indicator
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.
You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.104) in the
“Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
■Playback screen
1Playback indicator
2Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control sStops playback.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 70
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.33). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.104) in the “Information”
menu.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
1Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
3Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
Supported iTunes/iPod (as of February 2013)
• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)
• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later
PC
iTunes
Router
Playback starts
iPod
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 71
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via
HDMI.
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.83) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
■Playback screen
1Playback indicator
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
1
3
2
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
aResumes playback from pause.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
LT
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 72
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (Main zone) and in
another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (Main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources
can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2,
you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 5–6 or AUDIO 1–2 jacks)
of the unit.
• (RX-V775 only)
The party mode (p.76) allows you to play back the same audio output in Main zone
as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. The
connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used
(the unit or an external amplifier).
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (Main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 73
■Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.75), the surround back speakers in the main
zone do not output sound.
■Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in
Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
ZONE2/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
FL FR
12
3
45
76
9
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
P
TICAL
P
TICAL
O
AXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
C
O
VIDEO
MONITO
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
12
ARC
ANTENNA
FM
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
ZONE OUT
F
ZONE 2
NETWORKDC OUT
5V
0.5A
(NET)
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
12
3
45
76
9
QW
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
The unit (rear)
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 74
■Operating the unit from Zone2
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal
receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.108).
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
AUDI O 1 AUDIO 2
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV4
AV3
AV2
AV 1
(TV)
P
B
YP
R
12
ARC
ANTENNA
AM
AV 5
VIDEO
AV 6 AV OUT
NETWORKDC OUT
TRIGGER OUT
REMOTE
5V
0.5A
(NET)
12V
IN
OUT
0.1A
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
OUT
(RADIO)
REMOTE
IN
OUT
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 75
Controlling Zone2
1Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
3Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 5–6: AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
AUDIO 1–2: AUDIO 1–2 jacks
TUNER: FM/AM radio
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired
network source)
PHONO: PHONO jacks (RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A.
and Canada models])
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
4Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.53)
• Playing back iPod music (p.58)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.62)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.65)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.68)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.70)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (when using the
unit’s internal amplifier). When using an external amplifier, use the volume
control on it.
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
AV 5–6
AUDIO 1–2
TUNER
USB
NET
MAIN/ZONE2
RECEIVER z
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 76
■Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
(RX-V775 only)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.100) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
H
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
PARTY
PLAYBACK ➤Viewing the current status En 77
Switching information on the front display
1Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
* RX-V775 only
2To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–5
V-AUX
AV 1–6
AUDIO 1–2
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.55).
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
AudioDecoder
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
ProLogic
Information
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
PHONO
(RX-V775 only [except for U.S.A. and Canada
models])
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status*
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
INFO
DISPLAY
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 78
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
ToneControl
OPTION Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds. 79
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
79
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 79
Dialogue Adjust
(Dialog Adjust)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 79
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 79
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used. 80
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 80
Subwoofer
Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 80
Enhancer
(Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 80
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 80
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception. 80
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
55
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.61),
USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67). —
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.61),
USB storage device (p.64), or media server (p.67). —
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 79
■Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
aPress TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
bPress PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
■CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.48). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
❑Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
0
❑Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming
from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers
are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.48) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Ideal position
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 80
■Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
■Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
❑Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.52).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.52).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■Video Mode (Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Auto (Auto)
(default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Processing
(Processing) Enables the video signal processing.
Direct (Direct)
(default) Disables the video signal processing.
Stereo (Stereo)
(default) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 81
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 82
Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an
audio jack of others. 82
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 82
Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay. 83
Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 83
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback. 83
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 82
■Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2, USB, PHONO*
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
■Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–2
■Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV1” or “AV4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV2” or “AV3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the unit’s
corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, V-AUX, AV 1–4
Settings
Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 83
■Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources)
Settings
■DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.46) using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Off (default) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6,
V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 84
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (input source, sound program/surround decoder,
Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and HDMI output jack [RX-V775 only]) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.46).
■Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO): Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127).
❑Detail
Displays the assignments of the selected scene.
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 84
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the
scene assignments.
84
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 85
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 85
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Input Input source to be used
HDMI Output (RX-V775 only)
HDMI OUT jack to be used
Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used
Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 85
■Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Reset
Restores the default settings (p.46) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 86
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Sound Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
■Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation. 1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field. 0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field. 0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 87
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
■Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder”
to “bPLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto (default), Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix Enables/disables
monaural sound output. Off (default), On
Item Function Settings
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 7 (default: 3)
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 37
Manual Setup
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 91
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 91
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 91
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 91
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 92
Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 92
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 92
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 92
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 92
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 93
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 93
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 93
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 94
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 94
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 94
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 94
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 94
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 95
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 95
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume is adjusted. 95
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 95
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 96
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 97
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 97
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90
Network
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 98
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 98
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 98
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 99
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen. 99
Zone2 Set
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 100
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 100
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen. 100
Party Mode Set (RX-V775 only)
Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 100
Function
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 100
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 100
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 101
Trigger Output
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 101
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 101
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 101
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 102
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 102
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 102
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 103
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers, or bi-amp connection.
Settings
■Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
❑Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Basic (default) Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.73) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.21).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92
❑Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “5ch BI-AMP”, or when “Surround” is set to
“None”.
❑Front Presence
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.
Settings
❑Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
❑Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
❑Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2 (default)
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Use (default) Select this option when presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.
Use
Normal
(default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 93
■Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
■Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.37). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■Manual equalizer adjustment
1Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.37) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 HZ to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 94
■Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
❑Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2
Settings
❑Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
❑Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 95
■Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
■Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level when the volume
is adjusted.
Settings
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
❑Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.106) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically.
Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 96
❑Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.127).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–6, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 97
❑ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.23) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting (except for “HDMI OUT2” [RX-V775 only]) is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
❑Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
❑HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 (RX-V775 only)
HDMI OUT (RX-V675 only)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
■Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode
(the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 98
Network
Configures the network settings.
■IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■Manual network settings
1Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■Procedure
1Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 99
■Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■Procedure
1Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
❑Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the TV screen.
■Procedure
1Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100
■Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
❑Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
❑Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.91) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
❑Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.99).
■Party Mode Set
(RX-V775 only)
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.76).
Choice
Target: Zone 2
Settings
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.102) is set to “On”.
❑Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101
❑Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
■Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function in sync with the power status of each zone or
input switching.
❑Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–6, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–2, TUNER, PHONO*, (network sources), USB
* RX-V775 only (except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
❑Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
❑Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Settings
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone.”
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All (default)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102
■Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
■ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Off (default) Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 103
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
English (default) English
日本語 Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 104
Types of information
■Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
• (RX-V775 only)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
■Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
■System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113).
■Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address MAC address
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.105)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.106)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.105)
Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.106)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume setting for Zone2
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 105
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1Press CODE SET on the remote control.
2Press RECEIVER.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.108) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 105
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 105
TU (Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 106
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 106
MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 106
INIT Restores the default settings. 106
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 107
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 107
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
SPIMP.8MIN
REMOTEIDID1
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 106
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.95) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MON.CHK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
TUFM50/AM9
TVFORMATNTSC
YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
MON.CHKYES
INITCANCEL
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 107
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.113).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.104) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATEUSB
VERSIONxx.xx
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 108
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.109). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3Press TV z.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
■TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV
TV zTurns on/off the TV.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 109
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
• (RX-V675 and RX-V775 [U.S.A. and Canada models] only)
If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★) key, you
can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source
after pressing the star key.
• (RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.110).
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3Press the input selection key.
For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.46).
■Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
SOURCE zTurns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
aStarts playback of the selected
song/video.
hSearches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.108).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
DISPLAY
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
External device
operation keys
Input selection keys
External device
operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 110
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If
you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if
any key on the remote control does not work after you register the
remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function
to each key.
1Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
For TV: press TV z.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.
4Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
5Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.
aOn this unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
external device operation keys
For TV: TV operation keys
bOn the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned.
Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.
6Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are
learned.
7Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
Remote control of external device
5 to 10 cm apart
Note
• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
aPress CODE SET.
bPress RECEIVER.
cUse the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
OUT
TUNE
R
MAIN
ZO
NE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SCEN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RECEIVE
R
H
DM
I
A
V
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE z
SOURCE
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
External device
operation keys
External device
operation keys
Numeric keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 111
Clearing functions learned from other
remote controls
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models] only)
■Clearing the assignment for each key
1Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.
4Press the key that you want to reset.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.
5Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are
cleared.
6Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
■Clearing the assignments for each input
source
1Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
RE
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 112
Resetting remote control codes
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
1Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2Press the input selection key.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
aPress CODE SET.
bPress RECEIVER.
cUse the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
COD
E
CODE SET
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 113
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.107).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1Read the on-screen description.
2To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3If “Update Success Please Power Off!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front
panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.104). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter,
network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the
wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory
device (p.107).
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
MEMORY
5687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
NET
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
65
V-AUX
1234
12
12
34
SUR. DECODE
TV VO
T
L
V
CH
TV
INP
U
T
MU
T
E
CODE SE
T
9
0
1
0
ENT
MEM
O
RY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
V
I
E
ENHAN
C
E
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
RE
S
E
T
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
TO
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM V
O
L
U
M
E
PO
P-
U
P
/
ME
N
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LE
E
P
M
USI
C
N
ET
PART
YH
DMI
O
U
T
TUNE
R
MAIN
Z
ONE
2
US
B
MO
D
E
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NE
T
RADI
O
SOU
R
C
E
RE
C
EIVE
R
H
DM
I
AV
A
UDI
O
5
6
5
V
-
AU
X
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
COD
E
ENTER
Cursor keys
APPENDIX ➤Frequently asked questions En 114
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.37). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.91).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.95). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.100).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.95). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.100).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.80).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.127). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.100) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.102).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.105).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 115
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
aThe power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
bThe unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
cThe connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.20).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.102).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.105).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.20).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 116
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.108). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX. Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.112).
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
(RX-V775 [China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models]
only)
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.110).
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control. Learning is impossible in this case.
Memory capacity is full. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.111).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 117
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.95).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.94).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.91).
The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.93).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.80).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.92).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.37) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.92).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.97).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 118
Video
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.25).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.96).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.97). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.102).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.106).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.104). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.128).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.23 to 26).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 119
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.80).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.53).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.53).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.54).
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 120
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device. The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.98). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.98).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.65).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.98).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
Controller” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.98).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.107).
APPENDIX ➤Error indications on the front display En 121
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.65).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.58).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.33).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.105).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.65). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX ➤Ideal speaker layout En 122
Use this diagram as a guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.
Ideal speaker layout
12
3
45
6 7
99
QW
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
1 Front speaker (L)
2 Front speaker (R)
3 Center speaker
4 Surround speaker (L)
5 Surround speaker (R)
6 Surround back speaker (L)
7 Surround back speaker (R)
Q Presence speaker (L)
W Presence speaker (R)
9 Subwoofer
10° to 30°10° to 30°
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 123
Audio information
■Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 124
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 125
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 126
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO
out
Resolution 480i/
576i
480p/
576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/
576i
480p/
576p 720p 1080i 480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/50, 60 Hz mmmm
1080p/24 Hz mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p m
720p m
1080i m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
VIDEO
in
APPENDIX ➤Information on HDMI En 127
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.23) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.46)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.109)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.96) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
3Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
APPENDIX ➤Information on HDMI En 128
7Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
APPENDIX ➤Trademarks En 129
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United
States and/or other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Trademarks
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 130
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-V775]
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
[Other models]
Audio x 5 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2, PHONO)
[RX-V675]
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO 1–2)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, VIDEO [Front Panel])
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 6 (HDMI 1–5, V-AUX*)
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-V775]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- AV OUT x 1
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
[RX-V675]
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R
*1
, EXTRA SP L/R
*2
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- AV OUT x 1
- ZONE2 OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
[RX-V775]
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
[RX-V675]
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
Specifications
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 131
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-V775]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R................................................................. 95 W+95 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................. 110 W+110 W
Center..............................................................................110 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W
[RX-V675]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R................................................................. 90 W+90 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................. 105 W+105 W
Center..............................................................................105 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W
Surround Back L/R ............................................. 105 W+105 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-V775]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................130 W/ch
Center .......................................................................130 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................130 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................130 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................160 W/ch
[RX-V675]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch
Center .......................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................125 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]..........................150 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8
Ω
)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
[RX-V775]
Front L/R.....................................................................160 W/ch
Center ........................................................................160 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................160 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................160 W/ch
[RX-V675]
Front L/R.....................................................................150 W/ch
Center ........................................................................150 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................150 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.....................................................150 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-V775]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ..................................140/180/210/250 W
[RX-V675]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ..................................130/170/200/240 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω.............................100 or more
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 132
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
[RX-V775]
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models].............3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
[RX-V775]
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]........................ 60 mV
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
[RX-V775]
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT...................................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
[RX-V675]
AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ...........................................................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/560 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ......................... +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
[RX-V775]
PHONO
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]....................0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[RX-V775]
PHONO to AV OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............. 0.02% or less
AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)............................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
[RX-V775]
PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, AV OUT)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]............81 dB or more
AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................100 dB or more
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
[RX-V775]
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
[Except for U.S.A. and Canada models]
................................................................ 60 dB/55 dB or more
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
[RX-V675]
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back).......12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models]....................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................71 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 133
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................400 W/500 VA
[China, Asia and General models] ................................. 270 W
[Other models]................................................................ 300 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................0.10 W or less
[Other models]....................................................0.15 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
.................................................................................3 W or less
Network Standby On ...............................................3 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]............................................. 590 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
[RX-V775] ..... 435 x 171 x 368 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”)
[RX-V675] ..... 435 x 171 x 364 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-3/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
•Weight
[RX-V775] ..................................................... 10.5 kg (23.2 lbs)
[RX-V675] ..................................................... 10.0 kg (22.1 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX ➤Index En 134
Symbols
★ keys 13
Exclamation mark (!) 104, 113
Lock icon (o)102
Numerics
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 96
2.1-channel system 17
2ch Stereo (sound program) 50
3.1-channel system 17
4.1-channel system 17
4K signal (video signal resolution) 128
5.1-channel system 17
5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91
6.1-channel system 16, 20
7.1+2-channel system 16, 19
7.1-channel system 16, 19, 20
7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 91
7ch Stereo (sound program) 50
A
Access denied (error indication) 121
Access error (error indication) 121
Action Game (sound program) 49
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 79
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
ADVANCED SETUP menu 105
Adventure (sound program) 49
AirPlay 70
AM antenna connection 32
AM radio listening 53
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 23
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 96
Audio Decoder (front display information) 77
Audio device connection 31
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 65
Audio file format (USB storage device) 62
Audio In (Input menu) 82
AUDIO jack 22
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 97
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 23
Audio Signal (Information menu) 104
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 102
Auto Preset (FM radio) 57
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 37
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
Automatic speaker setting optimization 37
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 57
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 102
AV OUT jack 11, 12
B
Banana plug 20
Basic playback operation 45
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 79
Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Bi-amp speaker connection 21
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Bitstream 128
C
CAT-5 cable 33
Cellar Club (sound program) 50
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 87
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 87
Chamber (sound program) 50
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Check SP Wires (error indication) 121
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 43
CINEMA DSP 3D 48
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 79
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 50
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 57
Clearing (remote control) 111
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 55
COAXIAL jack 22
Component video cable 22
Component video connection (video device) 28
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 22
Composite video connection (video device) 29
Compressed Music Enhancer 52
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Crossover frequency setting 92
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 37
D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 101
DC OUT jack 11, 12
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 86
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 82
Decoder Off (front display information) 77
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 104
Default setting restoration 106
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 94
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 84
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 84
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 79
Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 79
Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 79
Dialogue normalization level 104
Digital coaxial cable 22
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 83
Digital optical cable 22
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 87
Index
APPENDIX ➤Index En 135
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 100
Direct (Sound Program menu) 87
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 123
DISPLAY key 13
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 100
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 42
DLNA 65
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 83
DMC Control (Input menu) 83
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 104
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 51
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 80
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 51
Drama (sound program) 49
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 123
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 86
DSP Program (front display information) 77
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 51
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 51
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 80
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 94
E
ECO (Setup menu) 102
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 102
Enhancer (Option menu) 80
ENHANCER (sound mode) 52
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 49
Error indication (front display) 121
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 80
EXTD Surround (Option menu) 80
Extended Surround (Option menu) 80
External device control (remote control) 108
External device operation key (remote control) 13
External power amplifier 34
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98
Firmware update 107
Firmware update (network) 107, 113
Firmware update (USB) 107
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 104
Firmware version check 107
FM antenna connection 32
FM Mode (Option menu) 80
FM radio listening 53
FM/AM radio tuning 53
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 53
Frequency step setting 53, 106
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
Front display (part names and functions) 10
Front display brightness 100
Front display information 77
Front panel (part names and functions) 8, 9
Front panel jack connection 31
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Function (Setup menu) 100
G
GND terminal 31
Ground lead 31
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 50
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 50
HDMI (Setup menu) 96
HDMI cable 22
HDMI connection (video device) 28
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 96
HDMI jack 22
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 104
HDMI OUT (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 97
HDMI output selection 45
HDMI signal compatibility 128
Headphones 48
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
High definition audio 128
High speed HDMI cable 22
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
Indicator (part names and functions) 10
INFO key 8, 9, 13
Information display (front display) 10
Information menu 103
Information switching (front display) 77
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Input (front display information) 77
Input menu 81
Input selection key (remote control) 13
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
Internal Error (error indication) 121
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 43
Internet radio listening 68
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 104
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 98
iPod charge 58
iPod connection 58
iPod content playback 59
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 70
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 70
L
Language (Setup menu) 103
APPENDIX ➤Index En 136
Learning (remote control) 110
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 87
Level (Sound Program menu) 87
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
Level (YPAO measurement result) 42
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 44
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 124
Lipsync 124
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 94
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 50
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Load (Scene menu) 84
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 124
M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 98
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 104
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 98
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 99
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Manual speaker configuration 91
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 54
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 95
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Measurement result (YPAO) 41
Media sharing setup 65
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 102
Menu language selection 36
Menu operation key (remote control) 13
MHL cable 22
MHL connection 32
MHL jack 22
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 121
MHL-compatible mobile device 32
MODE key 13
MON.CHK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 87
Monaural reception (FM radio) 53
Monitor check 106
Mono Movie (sound program) 49
MOVIE (sound program category) 49
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 49
Multi measurement (YPAO) 40
Multi Zone (Information menu) 104
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 99
Multiple room playback 72
Multi-zone 72
MUSIC (sound program category) 50
Music Video (sound program) 49
MUTE key 13
Muting 45
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 33
NAS connection 33
NAS content playback 65
Network (Information menu) 104
Network (Setup menu) 98
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 33
Network cable 33
Network connection 33
Network information 104
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 104
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 99
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 98
No content (error indication) 121
No device (error indication) 121
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 43
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 43
No MIC (YPAO error message) 43
No Signal (YPAO error message) 43
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 43
Noisy (YPAO error message) 43
Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Numeric key (remote control) 13
O
ON SCREEN key 13
OPTICAL jack 22
OPTION key 13
Option menu 78
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 44
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 44
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 87
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 93
PARTY key 13
Party mode 76
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100
PC connection 33
PC content playback 65
PHONES jack 8, 9
PHONO jack 11
Playback device connection 28
Playback device operation (remote control) 109
Please wait (error indication) 121
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Power cable connection 35
Power management 102
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 101
PRE OUT jack 11
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 54
Program Service (Radio Data System) 55
Program Type (Radio Data System) 55
Pure Direct 52
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 52
Q
Q factor 93
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) 55
Radio Data System information 55
Radio Data System tuning 55
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 55
Rear panel (part names and functions) 11, 12
Recording device connection 34
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 121
APPENDIX ➤Index En 137
Remote connection 74
Remote control (part names and functions) 13
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 109
Remote control code registration (TV) 108
Remote Control Code Search 108, 109
Remote control ID setting 105
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 105
Remote control sensor 8, 9
Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 104
REMOTE IN jack 11, 12
REMOTE OUT jack 11, 12
Rename (input name) 82
Rename (network name) 99
Rename (scene name) 85
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 82
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 85
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 61
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 67
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 64
Reset (remote control) 112
Reset (Scene menu) 85
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 95
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 87
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 42
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 49
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
Router connection 33
S
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 104
Save (Scene menu) 84
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 43
Scene configuration 46
SCENE function 46
SCENE link playback 46
Scene menu 83
Sci-Fi (sound program) 49
Setup menu 88
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 100
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 61
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 67
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 64
Signal information 104
SILENT CINEMA 48
Simple play (iPod) 60
Single measurement (YPAO) 39
Size (YPAO measurement result) 42
SLEEP key 13
Sleep timer 13
Sleep timer (Zone2) 75
Sound (Setup menu) 94
Sound field effect 48
Sound mode selection 47
Sound program 49, 50
Sound Program menu 85
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 105
Speaker (Setup menu) 91
Speaker cable connection 20
Speaker connection 19
Speaker impedance 15
Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 104
Speaker impedance setting 18, 105
Speaker indicator (front display) 10
Speaker placement 15
Spectacle (sound program) 49
Sports (sound program) 49
Standard (sound program) 49
Standby indicator (front panel) 8, 9
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 97
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 97
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 54
Status (Network, Information menu) 104
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 50
Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 22
Stereo reception (FM radio) 53
STP network cable 33
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 51
Straight decode 51
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 98
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 104
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Subwoofer connection 21
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 51
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 91
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 92
Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround decoder 51
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 86
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 86
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 80
System (Information menu) 104
System ID (System, Information menu) 104
T
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 94
The Bottom Line (sound program) 50
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 50
Tone Control (Option menu) 79
TONE CONTROL key 8, 9
TP (Traffic Program) 55
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 55
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 55
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 79
Trigger function 35
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 101
TRIGGER OUT jack 11, 12
Trigger Output (Function, Setup menu) 101
TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 104
Turntable connection 31
APPENDIX ➤Index En 138
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 96
TV connection 23
TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 23
TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 25
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 26
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 27
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 106
TV Format (System, Information menu) 104
TV operation (remote control) 108
TV operation key (remote control) 13
U
Unable to play (error indication) 121
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107
USB jack 8, 9
USB mass storage class device 62
USB Overloaded (error indication) 121
USB storage device connection 62
USB storage device content playback 62
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 43
V
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 107
Version error (error indication) 121
Video (Setup menu) 95
VIDEO AUX jack 8, 9
Video device connection 28
VIDEO jack 22
Video Mode (Option menu) 80
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 95
Video Out (Input menu) 83
Video pin cable 22
Video Signal (Information menu) 104
Video signal flow 126
Video signal type setting 106
Video/audio input jack combination 29
Virtual CINEMA DSP 48
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7
Voltage Selection 35
VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11, 12
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 83
Volume Trim (Option menu) 80
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7
W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 101
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 42
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 37
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer 37
YPAO error message 43
YPAO MIC jack 8, 9
YPAO microphone 37
YPAO warning message 44
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 99
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 100
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 100
Zone2 speaker connection 73
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF236A0/EN

Navigation menu